JP7254683B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A conventional game machine can execute a battle effect and a timer effect at the same time as a ready-to-win effect, and during the battle effect, it is possible to further execute a slow motion effect by slowing down the playback speed of the battle effect. There is a thing (for example, see patent document 1). Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-reading notice (specific light emission effect) by causing light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 JP 2016-105941 A

There is room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
display means;
light emitting means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a specific display effect of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of the starting condition;
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific light emission effect is a light emission effect in which the first mode and the second mode are alternately executed,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production executing means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode ,
In the second period, after displaying the effect moving image that progresses at the second speed, it is possible to execute a still effect of displaying a still image in which the effect moving image is stopped,
There are a plurality of production modes of the static production,
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which production mode is the production mode of the stationary production,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute information production that operates information display related to the game,
In the information presentation, the information display operation is continued even during execution of the static presentation.
It is characterized by
In addition, the game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
with
The display means can display a specific display (for example, a pending display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display,
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emission effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light,
The specific light emission effect is executed so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIGS. 11-28 and 11- 29 (A) ~ Figure 11-32 (H), Figure 11-49 (A) ~ Figure 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning part that lights up),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and during the first period of the specific light emission effect, the By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, so that the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. becomes even easier for the player to recognize.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (entering the game ball into the starting area), as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-105941, the identification based on the establishment of the predetermined condition The display (suspended display or active display) is displayed on the display means, and for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a pre-reading notice is executed that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display. In some cases, it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice (specific light-emitting effect) by causing light-emitting means to emit light. However, in such a gaming machine, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. In view of this point, there is a demand for a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 11). -28, FIGS. 11-29(A) to 11-32(H), and FIGS. The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display display start effect execution processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is output when the start winning is generated, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the lamp for flash at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp are turned on, and the effect image and the silhouette image are displayed. is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display/active display, suggestive content of each display mode, and selection ratio when execution of winning slash effect is determined in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example.

A mode for implementing a pachinko game machine, which is a game machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an embodiment.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. a speaker (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) for outputting sound.
According to this feature, the highly reproducible effect sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect execution means can output the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means during a predetermined period of the second period at the same speed as the first period, and In a specific period after the period, it is possible to output by the sound output means at a speed different from that in the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, first reach effect, second reach effect, first In the first half of each reach performance second half execution period of the third reach performance and fourth reach performance, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach performance execution period of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance. While the effect sound is output from 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4, in the latter half of each reach effect latter half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, V4. The part that outputs the effect sound at a different playback speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the playback speed V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the effect sound can be changed for a specific period of the second period in which the effect moving image is displayed at the second speed, so that the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light in at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode,
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period in a period shorter than that in the first period (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, execution periods of the first reach production, the second reach production, and the third reach production and the fourth The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than the execution period of the first half of the ready-to-win effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change period of the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progress of the presentation is slow, so that the presentation effect in the second period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
a predetermined effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect) in which a character effect animation is displayed in the first display area and a effect sound is output by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation; Information production that operates information display related to variable display (for example, rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), 2 (C) telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T) effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect in which the information display is operated at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 10-19 to 10- As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at a rotation speed of V3. , the part that displays the moving display of the telop at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. larger than the combined area of the area of and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the predetermined presentation rather than the information presentation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during which variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10). -18 to FIG. 10-25, in the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is executed at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In the display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 8,
The information effect is a moving display effect (for example, moving display of a message corresponding to the game state in the telop display area 079SG005T) in which the information display suggesting the state of the effect in the variable display being executed is sequentially moved and displayed in the second display area. the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a moving display effect for moving and displaying the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, in FIG. 10-2(C) As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time they are displayed again to the left. (the part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least part of the information display is always visible to the player, the player can easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sounds, such as speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ) and a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120). ,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect rendering that is different from the predetermined rendering and is for enhancing the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying the concentration line on the image display device 5 in the second reach production second half execution period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, further enhance the performance effect in the second period, and allow the player to recognize by the effect performance that the second period is over and the notification performance is to be executed. can be done easily.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The production executing means is
The effect production is performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, a mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 10-28 (C) is displayed, and As shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), it can be executed in a mode in which the number of displayed concentration lines is larger than that in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect rendering in which the degree of effect of enhancing the rendering effect increases sequentially (for example, FIGS. 10-28 (C) and 10-28 ( As shown in D), the portion where the number of displayed concentration lines increases as the battle effect progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effect of increasing the effect of the predetermined production is successively increased, the execution of the notification production after the second period ends is played by the effect production. make it easier for people to recognize

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area. Effect (for example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C) Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing telop movement display),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decoration pattern stops with a combination of a big hit as a big hit notification effect, the big hit occurs in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area including the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The production executing means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a reserved display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U). ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the suspension display and the first suspension storage display area 079SG005D, the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate are erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) including
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is awarded after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the movement display of
with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area A portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the change in the visibility of the first display area in the pre-notification period allows the player to easily recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and an image generation means (for example, display including a control unit 123),
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer by the image generating means (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the second image data A portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. over a predetermined period (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa and a part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge and display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first rendering layer changes over a predetermined period from the specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the detection of the action of the player by the action detection means (for example, control to the big win game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or parts that can signal that they are not controlled by the state),
An action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that prompts a player to act by displaying an action promoting image for executing the notification effect in the first display area is executable,
Although the visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect decreases, the visibility of the action promotion effect does not decrease (for example, the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the first image The part where the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as an image of data does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the action promoting effect stand out from the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the action.

Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed, and an information effect for operating information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- 2 (B) shown in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U rotating display of the reserved display, and movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C)) Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, a pre-notification effect of displaying a specific still image corresponding to the stoppage of progress of the predetermined effect being executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The information display operation in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, the first suspension Part where rotating display of reserved display in memory display area 079SG005D and second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and moving display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the pre-notification period. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the static image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect will be executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but the suspended display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are displayed. The part where the color of the 4th pattern that is attached is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (since the color of the image of the information effect does not change, the color does not change). It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific still image).

Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a moving image,
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect,
with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., first reach effect and third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., second reach effect and fourth reach effect) after the first section,
Each of the first section and the second section is a first period (for example, the first half of the ready-to-reach effect first half execution period, the first half of the second ready-to-win effect part of the execution period, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect part of the executing period, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect. production first half execution period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach production second half execution period, second reach production second half execution period, third reach production second half execution period, fourth Reach production second half execution period) and
The production executing means is
In the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part in which moving images of each ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
During the second period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 , the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the animation of each ready-to-win effect. ),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The predetermined effect is a first pattern that shifts to the second section after the execution of the first section (for example, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, and FIG. Variable display of super reach β3 shown in 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Further, the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the first section and the predetermined performance is executed without shifting to the second section or the transition to the second section is performed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game is finished and whether or not the privilege is given by executing the predetermined performance at the second speed in the second section, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The production executing means is
An end suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect ends in the first interval without transitioning to the second interval (for example, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect) is defeated by an enemy character) can be executed,
The end-suggesting effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, and 10-21 , FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is knocked down by the enemy character and the first A portion where the reach performance second half execution period or the third reach performance second half execution period is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in A portion that displays a moving image when an enemy character falls down due to a hit with an attack at a progress speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), animation when the friendly character falls down The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined performance when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance, the progress speed when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for the granting of the privilege, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth-speed effect moving image is not displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an action-promoting effect (for example, an operation-promoting effect) that prompts the player to act, and a notification effect (for example, , jackpot notification effect and loss notification effect) and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the action promoting effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the 4 Part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, since the predetermined performance progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion performance during the second period, the performance effect of the predetermined performance can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The action promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying the effective detection period for receiving the detection of the player's action by the action detection means. ,
When the validity detection period ends, the effect execution means detects the action of the player by the action detection means within the validity detection period from the timing after the end of the validity detection period. 10-33 (E), 10-34 (E), and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (F), the same notification effect can be executed as in the case A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, when the action detection means does not detect the action of the player, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the effective detection period elapses, so the action detection means detects the action of the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is not a big hit notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed;
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, figures 10-24 and figures 10-26 (E) to figures 10-26 (G), figures 10-29 (C) to figures 10-29 (E), figures 10-30 (B) to figures 10 -30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C), the attack of the ally character in the big hit notification effect The animation of the portion where hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the portion where the enemy character falls down is displayed at a progressing speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), the moving speed The part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, when the provision of the privilege is notified as the notification performance, the performance moving image with the progress speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to impress the player with the performance moving image of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 25,
The effect execution means performs a special effect during the second period only when a privilege is granted (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (pattern SG- 2. Still image display effect))).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to form 26,
The privilege granting means provides a first privilege (for example, a non-variable big hit jackpot game state) as the privilege and a second privilege (for example, a probability variable big win big hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. is grantable and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a resurrection effect shown in Modification 079SG-4) for notifying that a privilege will be granted after once notifying that the privilege will not be granted in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is granted in the notification effect, the second privilege is granted (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the big hit notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big win),
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the special performance is executed after the notification performance informs that the privilege is not granted, the first privilege or the second privilege is granted. (For example, as shown in the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the resurrection effect is executed after the deviation notification effect is executed, the non-probable variable jackpot Part where there is a case where it is controlled to the game state and a case where it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the execution of the special effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the provision of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and a first action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action-promoting image. is displayed on the display means to prompt the player's action (for example, an operation promotion effect), and whether or not the privilege is given based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means is determined. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (for example, a big hit notification effect and a losing notification effect);
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
After the start of the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect part),
When the action-promoting effect is executed by the first action-promoting image, the first action-promoting image is displayed while visibly displaying the effect moving image of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promoting effect is executed by the second action promoting image, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means so that the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is more difficult to see than when the first action promoting image is displayed. , displaying the second action-promoting image in a display area wider than the display area of the first action-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, the transparency of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so that the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second action promoting image is displayed is higher than when the first action promoting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, the operation promoting image 079SG005Bb The ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when is displayed is lower than the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and to make the player pay attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion effect. It can improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to form 28,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying, on the display means, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed (for example, FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting effect, a battle effect is displayed while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed. The part where the display of the effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 29,
The production executing means is
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first ready-to-reach effect and a third ready-to-reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second ready-to-reach effect and a fourth ready-to-reach effect) can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first reach production first half execution period and the third reach production first half execution period) in the predetermined production, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach It is possible to shift to the second half of the production execution period and the third reach production second half execution period),
The predetermined effect is a first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIGS. and variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22), and a second specific pattern (for example, , variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. A third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution of two specific sections, and is executable and
When shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the performance Display the effect moving image whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , a portion for executing the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third ready-to-reach effect second half part execution period to the fourth ready-to-win effect first half part execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, when shifting from the first reach production first half execution period to the first reach production second half execution period, the first reach production second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance, from the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win performance. , the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, since the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific effect, and when shifting from the second specific effect to the second specific effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and further, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect by changing the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect to the second speed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the feature part 079SG includes a sound synthesizing board 13 for generating sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the performance control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and effect sounds corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting sounds corresponding to the effects executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

In addition, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (holding display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of first special figure pending storage, and the number of second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the total area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 performs a reserved display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) which will be described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (for example, if a specific ready-to-win effect is in progress, a message corresponding to the state of the effect, such as "In XX mode!") is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display reaches the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and is displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first storage display area 079SG005D and the second storage storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 10-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. , to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are both extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is lost, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new pending memory is generated and the timing when a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display an image of a chance up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn to display the variable display of the decoration pattern and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partly invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is always constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this feature part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this way, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image whose rendering progress speed is slow in this characteristic portion 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progressing speed is V1 compared to the non-slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image is set to the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is always displayed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this feature part 079SG is based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG with reference to FIG. ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' that are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 079SG, as described later, the types of the variation patterns are determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β3 big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β type variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed in the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-win effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of fluctuation patterns PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. That is, for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win production is the third ready-to-win production. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 079SG191, a production control timer setting section 079SG192, a production control counter setting section 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 079SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, when starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 079SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, storage storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this characterizing section 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y) executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, when the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation of big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, in this characteristic portion 079SG, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, there is only one chance-up effect start timing. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss A still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16A, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation-promoting effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation-promoting effect to pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

10-18 to 10-35, description will be given of the effect modes of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the characteristic portion 079SG.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

During the period when friendly character A attacking enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big wins to control the big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the friend character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and the enemy character after that The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-26 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-27(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progressing speed V1 in the same manner as the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, the display of the moving image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is knocked down by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped with a combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach α3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and the enemy character A is defeated. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, ally character A and enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

As the battle effect progresses and the second half of the second ready-to-reach effect first half execution period is approaching, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

During the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

In other words, during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the moving image of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second reach effect latter half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with a winning combination after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A ) ~ as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), the case where the big hit notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in Figure 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H) In some cases, production is executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 10-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of the friendly character A does not hit the enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of the enemy character B hits the friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of missing symbols, and it is notified that the big win game state is not controlled.

10-21, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the enemy character B is knocked down by the enemy character B without the attack of the friend character A hitting. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progressing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(C), when it is time to develop the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-reach effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle presentation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-22 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the friend character B succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (E)), and the enemy character after that The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-30 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and FIGS. 10-32(A) to 10-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the effect moving image of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32 (B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5. - 特許庁

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern is displayed rather than the production animation of the chance-up production. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is super reach β2 variable display, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and the enemy character A defeats him, it is notified that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the portion where the attack of the friend character B fails and the portion where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25 and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the second half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B by updating the display of the meter 079SG005M, while enlarging the effect image 079SG005E. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the region 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

10-24 and FIGS. 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), as the big hit notification effect after the operation promoting effect, there is a moving image in which the attack of the friend character B hits the enemy character B. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

10-25 and FIGS. 10-35(E) to 10-35(G). On the other hand, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big win game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

10-25, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decoration symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

10-26 (H), 10-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 10-30 (E), 10-30 (I), 10-31 (H), As shown in FIGS. 10-32(H), 10-35(D), and 10-35(H), in this characteristic portion 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. is performed, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility is ensured during variable display including when the ready-to-win effect is executed and when the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music), effect sounds, and other effects sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a cycle shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the ready-to-win effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, an example has been illustrated in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second reach effect latter half part and during the execution period of the fourth reach effect latter half part execution period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the area of the third display area 079SG005Sb combined. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotation display of the suspension display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A part of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at a timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect performance of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect performance can be enhanced during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden to display the first display area 079SG005F. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when executing the big hit notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In the state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stop of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-win effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach production and the third reach production, the second During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance. You can prevent it from being lost. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friendly character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H) ), FIGS. 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and FIGS. 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), in the failure notification effect, a moving image when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the performance moving image of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the super reach variable display, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progressing speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, while the operation promoting effect is being executed, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive performance suggesting that the operation promoting performance is executed can be executed before the operation prompting performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive performance, the display of the performance animation of the fourth ready-to-reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect animation of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, a configuration in which the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) to 10-29 (E), Figures 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C) ), in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down progresses. Displayed at speed V2. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), 10-30 (E) to 10- 30 (G), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in this characteristic portion 079SG deviation notification production A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that it is controlled to the big win game state. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are reversed). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) has been exemplified in which the visibility of the fourth reach effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Furthermore, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic part 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention, the present invention can be applied. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effects of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the reproduction speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A) to 10-36 (D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth ready-to-win effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F can be lowered, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be prevented from being lowered.

As described above, in the modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the second After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect. do.

By displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in the modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big win notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of a mode in which a message indicating the gaming state is displayed as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the mode in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promoting effect (the operation promoting image 079SG005Ba or the operation promoting display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

10-33 and 10-34, the characteristic portion 079SG exemplifies a mode of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promoting effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emission colors) of the game effect lamps 9 is different from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image display of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Later, an example is given in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second half of the first reach effect execution period and the second half of the third reach effect, After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result shows the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked before the moving image of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as a production mode of the resurrection production, for example, a production in which the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character may be used. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine capable of changing the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display result is not correct, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high set value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC 079SG132, voice data ROM 079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13) capable of outputting effect sound, and a display capable of displaying effect animation means (for example, an image display device 5), and a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect ), and a light emitting means capable of emitting light (eg, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F). and wherein the display means is capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a pending display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect execution means is capable of progressing the effect during the first period of the predetermined effect. A production animation whose speed is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach production, a second reach production, a third reach production, During the execution period of the first half of each fourth ready-to-win effect, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1), the second of the predetermined effect after the first period During the period, it is possible to display, on the display means, an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first During the second half execution period of each of the ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2), The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10-19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production, from the speakers 8L and 8R Part where BGM, effect sound, etc. are output at normal playback speed V4), specific display effect ( For example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any one of the display patterns α to γ), and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) can be executed, The specific light emission effect is executed so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIGS. 11-28 and 11- 29 (A) ~ Figure 11-32 (H), Figure 11-49 (A) ~ Figure 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is lit), and the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-24, winning a prize When the time flash effect is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the win flash effect is not executed), the light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp) 135SG009F), and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d), wherein the first light emitting means A first period from the start of the light emission performance to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of the previous term winning), and from the predetermined time to the specific light emission performance. In the second period up to the specific timing of the target variable display (for example, the period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect), the specific light emitting effect is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first winning, and During the time flash effect execution period, the second light emitting means flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T2), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and is executed during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a manner corresponding to the variable display in the previous term. The middle portion flashes with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1, and flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T0 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter stage) game machine.

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and during the first period of the specific light emission effect, the By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, so that the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. becomes even easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort, and at the same time, depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, the target of the specific light emitting effect can be obtained. It is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display displayed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort when installed in a game hall, and whose effects are easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable in the performance and that the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the variable display can be executed. , a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player, and that can emit light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F); A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the fact that the condition is satisfied (for example, the occurrence of the start winning) (for example, the part where the pending display or the active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ). and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) for causing the light emitting means to emit light; The specific light emission effect is executed so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the effect (for example, FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29 (A ) ~ FIG. 11-32 (H), FIG. 11-49 (A) ~ FIG. 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit. part), the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, the winning flash effect is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed), the light emitting means is the first light emitting means (for example, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and , a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d), and the first light emitting means has the specific light emitting effect A first period from the start to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term) and from the predetermined timing to the target of the specific light emission effect. In a second period up to the specific timing of the variable display (for example, the period from the start of the flash effect for the late winning to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect for the winning), a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, and the late winning flash effect During the execution period, the part that blinks with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0) is a gaming machine. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(form)
The game machine of form A1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 11). -28, FIGS. 11-29(A) to 11-32(H), and FIGS. The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, it is characterized by a portion that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0), @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine according to form A1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start effect execution processing, thereby displaying an appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top. part), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 11-15, FIG. 11-30 (D) to As shown in FIGS. 11-32(H) and 11-49(B) to 11-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific display rotation display effect execution process to display a pending display or an active display. The part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The effect executing means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(A) to 11-32(H), the specific display When the display start effect B is executed, the win flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable flash lamp 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a character A is the first display mode). After acting on the reserved memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A, it can be displayed in a specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the reserved display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D) , Winning flash effect starts before the end timing of specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11-29 (A), FIG. 11-29(B), FIG. 11-49(A), and FIG. 11-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
The "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only the state of emitting light at low luminance but also the state of not emitting light.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emission effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 11-29 (A) to 11-48 (n), FIGS. 11-49 (A) to 11-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 11-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 11-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 11-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the previous notice effect, the sound corresponding to the previous notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light effect enables the player to execute the specific light effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before the completion of display of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIG. 11-28 , Figures 11-29(A) to 11-32(H) and Figures 11-49(A) to 11-50(D), the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the starting winning. If this is the case, after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display completes)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the player can quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the win flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light more than the predetermined mode during the second period. It is an effect that emits light in a specific mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1, During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the hindrance to other performances caused by the light emission.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to form A10,
The second period includes a period before execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and a period during execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 11-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A10 or form A11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the winning flash effect is A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second prize is displayed. During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means in the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed in the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby obstructing other displays and increasing the interest in the game. You can prevent it from dropping.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to form A13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in a second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light effect effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to form A15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emission means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, from the speakers 8L, 8R stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the late winning flash effect, the emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, by selecting the late winning flash effect process table and resetting and starting the process timer for the late winning flash effect process table, the late winning flash effect (the winning flash Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-69, FIG. During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70 (A ) ~ As shown in Fig. 11-89(n), even during the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, the win flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as a modification 135SG-1 As shown in FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70(A) to 11-89(n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (A) to 11-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. In the previous variable display pattern fixing period, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to form A20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to form A21,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 11-33 (J) , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A22,
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the effect is started, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at the brightness of C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to form A23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 11-96 (K) to 11-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 11-104 (K) to 11-106 (O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low-luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-90, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of super reach). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emitting mode does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine according to form A23 or form A24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body action effect shown in FIG. 11-90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggesting effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect shown in FIG. 11-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 11-90, during the execution period of the movable body operation suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash is performed from the subsequent start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. A portion for lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a luminance of C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, light can be emitted in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-108 (A) as modification 135SG-3 , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 11-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part that continues lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form A27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A26,
The light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-119 (A) and 11-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-win effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when the winning flash effect is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A28 is the gaming machine according to form A27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-119 as a modification 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form A29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
The effect executing means, during variable display, provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 11-119 as modification 135SG-4) and a second effect (for example, modification 135SG) different from the first effect. -4 as a super reach performance shown in Figure 11-119) can be executed,
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect in accordance with the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance and a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
A rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash performance at the time of winning, from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance to the movable body motion suggestion performance. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIGS. 11-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as a modification 135SG-5, FIG. 11- As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A32 is the gaming machine according to form A31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIGS. 11-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player's attention is focused on whether or not the specific light emission effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A33 is the gaming machine according to form A31 or form A32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestive effect is executed in the second mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the change suggestive effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form A34 is the gaming machine according to form A33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modification 135SG-5, FIGS. 11-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed with the display pattern ε, the portion where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed with the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light emission effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light emission effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form A35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A36 is the gaming machine according to form A35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific luminous effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, as a flash effect at the time of winning, the image display device 5 has different sizes The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlap with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-129 (L) and FIG. 11-130 (N) etc. , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A37 is the gaming machine according to form A35 or form A36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display targeted for the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the game amusement.

The gaming machine of form A38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping with the special pattern (see Fig. 11-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A35 to A38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 11-28, 11-42(a) to 11-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is emitted at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. the part that ends the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form A41 is the gaming machine according to form A40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form A42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A39 to A41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form A43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is established when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, the first starting port is operated during execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form A45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result is The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display after the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form A46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is established by passing the game medium;
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starter lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the display can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starter lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A47 is the gaming machine according to form A46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, A portion where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since there are many light emission variations of the specific light emission means, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form A48 is the gaming machine according to form A46 or form A47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display, which is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the starting winning flash effect. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. A player's sense of expectation can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form A49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A46 to A48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the game interest.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starting port lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 is a first reserved memory display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved memory by the number of circular reserved displays, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is displayed by the circular reserved display. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

Then, the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbols are being variably displayed, the number of the first special symbol pending storage, and the number of the second special symbol pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming A small pattern 135SG005M having a size smaller than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are arranged vertically. Further, the small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during the variable display.

11-3, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display region 135SG005M of the image display device 5. 1 Display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative design in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change The fourth game state designation command corresponds to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also called a "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game or a small win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 11-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "jackpot" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 11-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variable jackpot B" and "probability variable jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 135SG will be described with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "variable big hit B" or "variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is executed once, are common normal reach reach effects. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

In addition, the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic part 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effects, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss variation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect).

That is, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 135SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIGS. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 11-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The 1st special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A has a game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and although the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred, the special that has not yet started The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B has not started yet although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 11-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 135SG191, a production control timer setting unit 135SG192, a production control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing an area for storing a flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory in association with the number of reserved memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the content of the pending memory satisfying the start condition ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 11-11(C), a storage area similar to the receive command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a hold The stored number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing portion 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 11-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 11-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing portion 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "big hit". It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 135 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic part 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of retained memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 judgment values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range of possible fluctuation pattern judgment random numbers MR3. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

11-14 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

At step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a design designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A when starting winning.

At step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the suspended display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. After the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect execution process (step 135 SGS163) for executing a winning flash effect. For executing a specific display rotation display effect (see FIGS. 11-19 (B-1) to 11-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the suspended display or active display Specific display rotating display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined as the pre-reading notice in the feature part 135SG, the variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is performed. Starting lamp light emission effect execution processing (step 135SG165) for executing the starting lamp light emitting effect of causing the starting lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the end , and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and setting the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 11-15 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), the It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). When the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. 25% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and 10% of the time, the pending display forewarning effect is executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

In other words, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (jackpot expectation), and the pending display or the active display is displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be missed is the highest when the target is set (expectation for big hit according to display color of pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 11-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a mode in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 11-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 11-15 as the specific display display start rendering execution processing. In the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command has been received (whether the start winning designation command reception flag is set). ) is determined (step 135SGS252). If no starting winning designation command is received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated. In addition, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning win command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is subject to the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (suspension display or active display) is displayed. The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display display start effect (step 135SGS259), and executes specific display display start effect execution processing. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (specific display display start The value of process timer for effect A or process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135 SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (current specific display display start effect being executed) is decremented by 1. process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect being executed does not time out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect being executed. (Step 135 SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect during execution has timed out (step 135 SGS261; Y), whether the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). When the final process timer for specific display start effect times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is terminated (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. If the final specific display display start rendering process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next specific display display start rendering process timer is started, and the next specific display is started. The effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for display start effect (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a starting prize is generated and it is decided not to execute the prefetching notice effect (holding display notice effect) based on the starting prize, or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in FIGS. , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as the specific display display start effect A. be.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is about 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other suspended displays and active displays as the specific display rotating display effect described above. Transition to display with rotation animation in .

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 11-20(A) to 11-20(C) and FIGS. 11-20(C-1) to 11-20(C-4), as the specific display display start effect B, first, On the image display device 5, an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation is displayed that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold indication is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display display start effect B is finished. It is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when executing the specific display start effect B targeting the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. need. Then, the suspended display after the end of the specific display display start effect B is transferred to the rotation animation display in the first suspended memory display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, when the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start win and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist. , an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the start winning, as in FIGS. 11-20(C-1) to 11-20(C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds. The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotating display effect.

FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 11-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), further whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 11-24, when the variable display result is a failure, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the target of the flash effect at the time of winning of the relevant entry (the entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 11-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) and 11-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this feature part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the previous term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character may be output once. Also, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be repeatedly output. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as a sound corresponding to the notice effect and a sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are different using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If neither (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effect has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last term has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next previous term winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the next period (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

At step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. As a form corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 11-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half to the start timing of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by a lamp 135SG009F for winning a flash in an image display device 5 is flashed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at winning, a sound corresponding to the flash performance at winning is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit light in white or red as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. Since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower brightness than the early winning flash effect (see FIG. 11-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

As shown in FIG. 11-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (especially the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIGS. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

Further, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation at step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning after decreasing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period is started, and the process data 1 Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the latter winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not the flash effect object flag at the time of winning of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is the variable display for flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

If it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command has been received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the symbol confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the flash effect execution process at the time of winning is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the present characteristic section 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 11-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 11-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a manner corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), blinking control is not executed in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the game effect The flashing control of the lamp 9 is performed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices if it is determined whether or not, and the advance notice effect can be executed according to the determination result. Further, when determining the effect pattern of the notice effect in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the advance notice effect in the characteristic portion 135SG is a dialogue advance notice effect in which the dialogue of the character is displayed on the image display device 5 and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed dialogue.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after step 135SGS366 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination command has been received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decoration design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device at the time of execution of the winning flash effect in the present characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-28 to 11-68. First, FIG. 11-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during execution of variable display, and it is determined to execute a winning flash effect based on the starting winning. In addition, FIG. 11-28 shows both the case where the execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the starting winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 11-29 to 11-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 11-49 to 11-68 show that a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning, while the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

11-29 to 11-48 ``When execution of pending display notice effect and winning flash effect is determined'', the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in FIGS. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the object of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 11-27 (A) to Fig. 11-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production, such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 11-28 and FIG. 11-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-30(C), and 11-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (FIGS. 11-32 (G) and FIG. 11 -32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-32 (G), and 11-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). In addition, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 11-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

11-32(H), 11-33(I), and 11-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be changed according to the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(H) and 11-33(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 (J), 11-34 (K) and 11-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-33(J), the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-34(K) to 11-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (S) to 11-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 11-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (Y) and 11-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (Y) and 11-41 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapping manner even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40(W) and 11-40(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-42(a) and 11-42(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 11-43(c) to 11-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 11-43(d) and 11-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 11-45(g) to 11-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 11-46 (j)), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11-45(g) and 11-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated with the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Incidentally, although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (m) and 11-48 (n), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a form corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emission effect is From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the starting winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 11-27 (A) to Fig. 11-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, As shown in 11-28 and FIG. 11-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-50(C), and 11-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , Appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the object of the flash effect for winning a prize (previous flash effect for winning a prize) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 11-19 (B-1) to Fig. 11-19 (B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the above-described specific display display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 ends (FIGS. (See Fig. 11-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started. there is

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this characterizing portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-52 (G) and 11-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). In addition, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 11-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

11-52(H), 11-53(I), and 11-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 11-52(H) and 11-53(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Whether or not the variable display is being executed can be confirmed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-53 (J), 11-54 (K) and 11-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-53(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state where the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapping manner even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-54(K) to 11-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-58 (S) to 11-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 11-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ) also, as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, flashing of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (Y) and 11-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost according to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small display. The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (Y) and 11-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 11-60 (W) and 11-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-62(a) and 11-62(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 11-63(c) to 11-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 11-63(d) and 11-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 11-65(g) to 11-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 11-65(g) and 11-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Incidentally, although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 11-66 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-68 (m) and 11-68 (n), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, so that the player can easily recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect. . Further, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and has a brightness of C2 and a cycle during the latter winning flash effect execution period. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize is generated during variable display, whether or not the winning flash effect is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start prize is generated during the variable display, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A with the display pattern α to display pattern γ (holding display notice After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), the active display is displayed as a specific display rotating display effect. In addition to executing the rotating display, the winning flash effect (the early winning flash effect and the late winning flash effect) may be executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, 11-30 (D) to 11-32 (H), and 11-49 (B) to 11-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is 11-15, FIGS. 11-30(D) to 11-32(H), and FIGS. 11-49(B) to 11 As shown in -50 (D), it is displayed as a suspended display and a rotation animation, and as shown in FIGS. , the rotation animation of the hold display is started, so that the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), when the specific display display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of display of the pending display, as a flash effect at the time of winning Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous. 11-49(A) to 11-50(D), even when the specific display display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 11-50(D), the winning flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A, so the display pattern of the pending display is any one of the display patterns α to γ. Even so, since the win-time flash performance can be started before the end of the specific display display start performance, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the win-time flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-28, Figure 11-29 (A), Figure 11-29 (B), Figure 11-49 (A), and Figure 11-49 (B), when winning a prize based on the starting prize When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once extinguished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame When the lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, the luminance is C3, which is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes a state in which the prize winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at low brightness, and in addition to the state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(A) to 11-48(n) and FIGS. 11-49(A) to 11-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effects can be executed depending on whether or not they are being executed, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effects during execution of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 11-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-28, Figure 11-29 (A) to Figure 11-32 (H), Figure 11-49 (A) to Figure 11-50 (D), at the time of winning according to the start winning When the execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the flash lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of prize flashes at the brightness C1, and during the period of execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term, the flash at the time of prize is flashed. By blinking the winning lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1 so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning at the later stage, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 11-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the latter winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period during which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the first prize, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the second prize. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and making the game interesting. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in game interest has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, other effects will be performed at the time of winning. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(A) to 11-48(n), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning starts. During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking. Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously executing the blinking of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F even during the symbol fixing period. can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in accordance with the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention has been exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term ends, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, the player can be made to recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during the variable display, and variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, the special pattern (see FIG. 11-40 etc.) that stops in the “middle” decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-42(a) to 11-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning is improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce discomfort when blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect object due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of ending the light emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-21, when the start winning to the first starting opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super ready to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or the active display can be displayed in any one of the display patterns α to display patterns γ that differ in the degree of expectation of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the light emission mode of the lamps 9 and the like, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 11-69 to 11-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be executed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 11-27 (A) to Fig. 11-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (sound corresponding to the advance notice production) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 11-69 and FIG. 11-70(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-69, 11-71(C), and 11-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display of the pending display of is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in this modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter period (Fig. 11-73 (G) and See FIG. 11-73 (H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 11-69, 11-73 (G) and 11-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

11-74(I) and 11-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 11-74 (J), 11-75 (K) and 11-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-69, 11-76 (M) and 11-76 (N), during the symbol fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the second stage The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the blinking of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-75(K) to 11-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the winning flash effect sound from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the late winning time is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-79 (S) to 11-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 11-81 ( Refer to W) In this variation 135SG-1, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and a special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as the flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 11-81(W), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. That is, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display to which the flash effect for winning is to be performed, the flash effect for winning is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-82 (Y) and 11-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-82 (Y) and 11-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 11-81 (W) and 11-81 (X), while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-83(a) and 11-83(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 11-84(c) to 11-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 11-84(d) and 11-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 11-86(g) to 11-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 11-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-89 (m) and 11-89 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continuously executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-69, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the starting entrance lamp light emission effect is used. From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

As described above, in this modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the form of stopping the display of the image 135SG005S is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Further, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the lighting for the flash for winning the prize 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during the execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 again selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of sound corresponding to winning flash effect, emission of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of a new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the performance, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIG. 11-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this variation 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

Also, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the explanation of FIG. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach productions of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach production of super reach, the reach production of super reach α and the reach production of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach performances with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a winning flash effect. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is During the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the first display area 135SG005F is once whited out, the movable body 32 is repeatedly moved between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the performance position described above). Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the action of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the presentation position (when the movable body action presentation is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 11-91(B), 11-92(C), and 11-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 11-93(E) to 11-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 11-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-95 (I) to 11-96 (L), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 11-90 (A) and FIGS. 11-96 (K) to 11-97 (N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the motion suggesting effect of the movable body, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 11-90(A), 11-98(O), and 11-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggestion effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, output of a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 11-99(B), 11-100(C), and 11-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 11-101(E) to 11-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 11-102 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-103 (I) to 11-104 (L), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 11-90 (B) and FIGS. 11-104 (K) to 11-105 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestive effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body action suggestive rendering ends, as shown in FIGS. 11-90(B) and FIGS. , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Although not shown in FIG. 11-90(B), the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable object motion presentation at volume V1 (see FIG. 11-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 11-90(B), 11-107(Q), and 11-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts super reach. At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. As the reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach effect of super reach α are used so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the period T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-96(K) to 11-98(O) and FIGS. 11-104(K) to 11-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out). In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished according to the execution of , and thereafter, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on according to the execution of the movable body action effect (moving the movable body 32 to the effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the effect suggesting the operation of the movable body. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes step by step, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-108(B), 11-114(A) to 11-118(F), step-up effects are executed during the variable display in which the winning flash effects are being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during the execution of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the cycle T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (eg, the upper position of the image display device 5) to the rendering position (eg, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be notified that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which one of the light emitting modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the operation performance start timing, and the ready-to-win performance is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed at a rate of 70% from the ready-to-win effect start timing. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since it may be during the execution period of ready-to-win performance, the game determines whether the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning is during the execution period of moving body action performance or during the execution period of super-ready-to-win performance. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of using the lighting mode and the case of using the lighting mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body action effect during the variable display that is the object of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the super reach variable display, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body motion. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestive presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be finished at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (reserved display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white round shape, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α and is blue. and a red round display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with flashing white, can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of , as a pending display or active display is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, with respect to the degree of expectation of a big win for the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for a big win may be set lower than that of the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in this modification 135SG-5, as the display patterns for the pending display and the active display, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε that can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ are provided. The display pattern α may also be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Further, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect (display pattern β or display pattern β of the pending display or the active display) and the display pattern are determined as determination of execution of the winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In this modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode and special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in this variation 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an action rendering that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and the first effect effect have different effects. A second effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the effect effect is executed by the first effect effect or the second effect effect, and by executing the win-time flash effect, the effect effect is changed to the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for execution in the action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to attract attention, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display pattern of the specific display may be changed to the display pattern β or γ as a result of acting on another character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-121 (A) and 11-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the display is variable, the first start opening is won When (start winning) occurs, and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. , and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character (see FIG. 11-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Next, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 11-122(C) and 11-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-123(G) and 11-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-123(I) and 11-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friendly character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to occur. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, the display patterns of the pending display and the active display are the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε in the display pattern α to the display pattern γ described in the characteristic portion 135SG. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ, the specific display display start effect A (see FIG. 11-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is executed. is displayed in the display pattern ε, the specific display display start effect B (see FIG. 11-20) or the period during which the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is specified as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. A specific display start effect longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as the prize-winning flash effect, a form in which the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed stepwise according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-124 (A) and 11-124 (B), winning a prize to the first start port ( When a start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the win flash effect are determined based on the start win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-125(C) and 11-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Flashing control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the late winning flash effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-127 (G) and 11-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at volume V2. , Blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), game effect lamp 9 except stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y with brightness C2 and blinking with cycle T2 (Fig. 11- 27(A) to FIG. 11-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined according to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

11-128(I) and 11-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 11-128 (J), 11-129 (K) and 11-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed irrespective of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-128(J), the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 11-129(K) and 11-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 11-130 (M) and 11-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M on the image display device 5 indicates a failure. Along with the derived display (displayed with the variable display stopped), the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the pattern confirmation period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are overlapped and displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large size silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by imparting surprise to the player.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 is provided. Before the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap with the active display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is exemplified in a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (see FIG. 11-40, etc.) stopped in the decoration symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be overlapped and displayed. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a form in which the special pattern stops in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting win is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this variation 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining variable display period and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp, blue light emission with a luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with a luminance C2 according to the display pattern γ are performed. is provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the win flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the flash effect at the time of winning may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the winning starting flash effect. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display, which is the object of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking as the starter lamp light emission effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starter lamp is started as the starter lamp light emission effect. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect in this way, the flashing cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is regarded as the flashing cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this way, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the characterizing portion 135SG has a configuration in which the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the like are turned off once when the winning flash effect is executed. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than that of the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display on the image display device 5. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, when the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, in the characteristic portion 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, blinks the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 temporarily. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), and the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It is executable, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash effect differs depending on the lamp (characteristic part 135SG, FIGS. 11-1 to 11-68), and the winning flash effect during the fixed period of the variable display pattern (Modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 11-69 to 11-89), capable of executing reach effects of super reach with different expectations of big hits, and moving body operation before reach effects with high expectations of big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 11-90 to 11-107), it is possible to execute a step-up effect during variable display, and if the step-up effect is executed when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, flash at the time of winning While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 11-108 to 11-118) that does not change from the light emission mode according to the response, the movable body operation effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the lamp for flash at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different depending on the change to the light emission mode (variant 135SG-4, FIGS. 11-119), and the display pattern α to display pattern ε are provided as the display mode of the pending display and the active display. Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 11- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern ε is changed to any one of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (variation 135SG- 6, FIGS. 11-121 to 11-123), the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning (modification 135SG-7, FIG. 11-124 to FIG. 11-130), etc., but the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions or modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions or modifications. good.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
display means;
light emitting means;
production execution means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a specific display effect of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the satisfaction of the starting condition;
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific light emission effect is a light emission effect in which the first mode and the second mode are alternately executed,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production executing means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode ,
In the second period, after displaying the effect moving image that progresses at the second speed, it is possible to execute a still effect of displaying a still image in which the effect moving image is stopped,
There are a plurality of production modes of the static production,
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which production mode is the production mode of the stationary production,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute information production that operates information display related to the game,
In the information presentation, the game machine continues the information display operation even during execution of the stationary presentation .

Images